* ldmisc.c (vfinfo): Add %H.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set C6X
26 @set H8300
27 @set HPPA
28 @set I960
29 @set M68HC11
30 @set M68K
31 @set MMIX
32 @set MSP430
33 @set POWERPC
34 @set POWERPC64
35 @set Renesas
36 @set SPU
37 @set TICOFF
38 @set WIN32
39 @set XTENSA
40 @end ifset
41 @c man end
42
43 @ifnottex
44 @dircategory Software development
45 @direntry
46 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
47 @end direntry
48 @end ifnottex
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
96 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97 Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset I960
140 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset ARM
143 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68HC11
149 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset M68K
152 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset SPU
161 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset TICOFF
164 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset WIN32
167 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset XTENSA
170 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171 @end ifset
172 @end ifclear
173 @ifclear SingleFormat
174 * BFD:: BFD
175 @end ifclear
176 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
180 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
181 * LD Index:: LD Index
182 @end menu
183 @end ifnottex
184
185 @node Overview
186 @chapter Overview
187
188 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189 @cindex what is this?
190
191 @ifset man
192 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
193 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
194 @c man end
195
196 @c man begin SEEALSO
197 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199 @file{ld}.
200 @c man end
201 @end ifset
202
203 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
205 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
206 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
207 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
208
209 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
210 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
213 @ifset man
214 @c For the man only
215 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
216 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
218 @end ifset
219
220 @ifclear SingleFormat
221 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
223 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226 @end ifclear
227
228 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
231 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
232 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
234 @c man end
235
236 @node Invocation
237 @chapter Invocation
238
239 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
241 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
242 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243 you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
245 @c man end
246
247 @ifset UsesEnvVars
248 @menu
249 * Options:: Command Line Options
250 * Environment:: Environment Variables
251 @end menu
252
253 @node Options
254 @section Command Line Options
255 @end ifset
256
257 @cindex command line
258 @cindex options
259
260 @c man begin OPTIONS
261
262 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264 @cindex standard Unix system
265 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
266 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267 link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269 @smallexample
270 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271 @end smallexample
272
273 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
274 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
278 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
279 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
284 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286 noted in the descriptions below.
287
288 @cindex object files
289 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292 an option and its argument.
293
294 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298 message @samp{No input files}.
299
300 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
301 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
306 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
311
312 For options whose names are a single letter,
313 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315 option that requires them.
316
317 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
318 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
319 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
320 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
321 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
322 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324 output.
325
326 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331 accepted.
332
333 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
335 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336 compiler driver) like this:
337
338 @smallexample
339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
340 @end smallexample
341
342 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
343 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350 @smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352 @end smallexample
353
354 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355 linker:
356
357 @table @gcctabopt
358 @include at-file.texi
359
360 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
361 @item -a @var{keyword}
362 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
368 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377 interface.
378
379 @ifset I960
380 @cindex architectures
381 @kindex -A @var{arch}
382 @item -A @var{architecture}
383 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
385 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
387 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
389 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
390 family}, for details.
391
392 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
393 other architecture families.
394 @end ifset
395
396 @ifclear SingleFormat
397 @cindex binary input format
398 @kindex -b @var{format}
399 @kindex --format=@var{format}
400 @cindex input format
401 @cindex input format
402 @item -b @var{input-format}
403 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
404 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
406 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
407 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
408 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
409 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
410 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414 @xref{BFD}.
415
416 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418 linking object files of different formats), by including
419 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
420 particular format.
421
422 The default format is taken from the environment variable
423 @code{GNUTARGET}.
424 @ifset UsesEnvVars
425 @xref{Environment}.
426 @end ifset
427 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
428 @code{TARGET};
429 @ifclear man
430 see @ref{Format Commands}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @end ifclear
433
434 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @cindex compatibility, MRI
437 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
439 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
440 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
441 @ifclear man
442 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443 @end ifclear
444 @ifset man
445 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446 @end ifset
447 Introduce MRI script files with
448 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
449 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
451 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453 @cindex common allocation
454 @kindex -d
455 @kindex -dc
456 @kindex -dp
457 @item -d
458 @itemx -dc
459 @itemx -dp
460 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
466 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
477 @cindex entry point, from command line
478 @kindex -e @var{entry}
479 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
480 @item -e @var{entry}
481 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
490 @kindex --exclude-libs
491 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
493 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
494 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499 be treated as hidden.
500
501 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512 regardless of this option.
513
514 @cindex dynamic symbol table
515 @kindex -E
516 @kindex --export-dynamic
517 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
518 @item -E
519 @itemx --export-dynamic
520 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
521 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
530
531 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534 linking the program itself.
535
536 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
537 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
538 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
539
540 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
544 @ifclear SingleFormat
545 @cindex big-endian objects
546 @cindex endianness
547 @kindex -EB
548 @item -EB
549 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551 @cindex little-endian objects
552 @kindex -EL
553 @item -EL
554 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555 @end ifclear
556
557 @kindex -f @var{name}
558 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559 @item -f @var{name}
560 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
561 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574 machine specific performance.
575
576 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
579 @kindex -F @var{name}
580 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
581 @item -F @var{name}
582 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
583 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594 @var{name}.
595
596 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
597 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
598 object files.
599 @ifclear SingleFormat
600 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
601 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
602 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
603 environment variable.
604 @end ifclear
605 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606 creating an ELF shared object.
607
608 @cindex finalization function
609 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
610 @item -fini=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614 the function to call.
615
616 @kindex -g
617 @item -g
618 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
620 @kindex -G @var{value}
621 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
622 @cindex object size
623 @item -G @var{value}
624 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630 @cindex runtime library name
631 @kindex -h @var{name}
632 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
633 @item -h @var{name}
634 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
635 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641 @kindex -i
642 @cindex incremental link
643 @item -i
644 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
646 @cindex initialization function
647 @kindex -init=@var{name}
648 @item -init=@var{name}
649 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652 function to call.
653
654 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
655 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
656 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
657 @item -l @var{namespec}
658 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
662 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
663 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
664
665 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
666 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672 @var{filename}.
673
674 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
681 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
682 archives multiple times.
683
684 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686 @ifset GENERIC
687 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
688 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
689 behaviour of the AIX linker.
690 @end ifset
691
692 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
693 @kindex -L @var{dir}
694 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
695 @item -L @var{searchdir}
696 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
697 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
699 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
702 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
703 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705 option is specified.
706
707 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
710 @ifset UsesEnvVars
711 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
712 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
713 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714 @end ifset
715
716 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720 @cindex emulation
721 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
722 @item -m @var{emulation}
723 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730 configured.
731
732 @cindex link map
733 @kindex -M
734 @kindex --print-map
735 @item -M
736 @itemx --print-map
737 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738 information about the link, including the following:
739
740 @itemize @bullet
741 @item
742 Where object files are mapped into memory.
743 @item
744 How common symbols are allocated.
745 @item
746 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
748 @item
749 The values assigned to symbols.
750
751 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757 linker script containing:
758
759 @smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763 @end smallexample
764
765 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766 option is used:
767
768 @smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775 scripts.
776 @end itemize
777
778 @kindex -n
779 @cindex read-only text
780 @cindex NMAGIC
781 @kindex --nmagic
782 @item -n
783 @itemx --nmagic
784 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
787
788 @kindex -N
789 @kindex --omagic
790 @cindex read/write from cmd line
791 @cindex OMAGIC
792 @item -N
793 @itemx --omagic
794 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
795 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
797 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799 specification published by Microsoft.
800
801 @kindex --no-omagic
802 @cindex OMAGIC
803 @item --no-omagic
804 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
808
809 @kindex -o @var{output}
810 @kindex --output=@var{output}
811 @cindex naming the output file
812 @item -o @var{output}
813 @itemx --output=@var{output}
814 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
815 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818 @kindex -O @var{level}
819 @cindex generating optimized output
820 @item -O @var{level}
821 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
822 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
823 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
828
829 @kindex -q
830 @kindex --emit-relocs
831 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
832 @item -q
833 @itemx --emit-relocs
834 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
835 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837 in larger executables.
838
839 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
841 @kindex --force-dynamic
842 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843 @item --force-dynamic
844 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845 to VxWorks targets.
846
847 @cindex partial link
848 @cindex relocatable output
849 @kindex -r
850 @kindex --relocatable
851 @item -r
852 @itemx --relocatable
853 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
854 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
855 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857 @code{OMAGIC}.
858 @c ; see @option{-N}.
859 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
863 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867 with input files in other formats at all.
868
869 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871 @kindex -R @var{file}
872 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873 @cindex symbol-only input
874 @item -R @var{filename}
875 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879 programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
881 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
882 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
883 the @option{-rpath} option.
884
885 @kindex -s
886 @kindex --strip-all
887 @cindex strip all symbols
888 @item -s
889 @itemx --strip-all
890 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892 @kindex -S
893 @kindex --strip-debug
894 @cindex strip debugger symbols
895 @item -S
896 @itemx --strip-debug
897 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899 @kindex -t
900 @kindex --trace
901 @cindex input files, displaying
902 @item -t
903 @itemx --trace
904 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
905
906 @kindex -T @var{script}
907 @kindex --script=@var{script}
908 @cindex script files
909 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
910 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
912 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
913 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
914 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917 options accumulate.
918
919 @kindex -dT @var{script}
920 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921 @cindex script files
922 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933 @samp{gcc}).
934
935 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
936 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937 @cindex undefined symbol
938 @item -u @var{symbol}
939 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946 @kindex -Ur
947 @cindex constructors
948 @item -Ur
949 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
951 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
952 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956 @samp{-r} for the others.
957
958 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966 in a linker script.
967
968 @kindex -v
969 @kindex -V
970 @kindex --version
971 @cindex version
972 @item -v
973 @itemx --version
974 @itemx -V
975 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
976 lists the supported emulations.
977
978 @kindex -x
979 @kindex --discard-all
980 @cindex deleting local symbols
981 @item -x
982 @itemx --discard-all
983 Delete all local symbols.
984
985 @kindex -X
986 @kindex --discard-locals
987 @cindex local symbols, deleting
988 @item -X
989 @itemx --discard-locals
990 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
993
994 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
995 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996 @cindex symbol tracing
997 @item -y @var{symbol}
998 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001 to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1007 @item -Y @var{path}
1008 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009 for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012 @item -z @var{keyword}
1013 The recognized keywords are:
1014 @table @samp
1015
1016 @item combreloc
1017 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018 lookup caching possible.
1019
1020 @item defs
1021 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1022 shared libraries are still allowed.
1023
1024 @item execstack
1025 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
1027 @item initfirst
1028 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033 objects.
1034
1035 @item interpose
1036 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037 but the primary executable.
1038
1039 @item lazy
1040 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043 Lazy binding is the default.
1044
1045 @item loadfltr
1046 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047 runtime.
1048
1049 @item muldefs
1050 Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052 @item nocombreloc
1053 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055 @item nocopyreloc
1056 Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058 @item nodefaultlib
1059 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060 ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062 @item nodelete
1063 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065 @item nodlopen
1066 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068 @item nodump
1069 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
1071 @item noexecstack
1072 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074 @item norelro
1075 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
1077 @item now
1078 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082 first called.
1083
1084 @item origin
1085 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
1087 @item relro
1088 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
1090 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
1096 @end table
1097
1098 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1099
1100 @kindex -(
1101 @cindex groups of archives
1102 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1103 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114 resolved.
1115
1116 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118 more archives.
1119
1120 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1125 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1126 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130 restore the old behaviour.
1131
1132 @kindex --as-needed
1133 @kindex --no-as-needed
1134 @item --as-needed
1135 @itemx --no-as-needed
1136 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1137 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1138 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1140 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141 emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142 from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143 DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144 undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1145 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
1147 @kindex --add-needed
1148 @kindex --no-add-needed
1149 @item --add-needed
1150 @itemx --no-add-needed
1151 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1155
1156 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1158 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160 @kindex -Bdynamic
1161 @kindex -dy
1162 @kindex -call_shared
1163 @item -Bdynamic
1164 @itemx -dy
1165 @itemx -call_shared
1166 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1171 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1172
1173 @kindex -Bgroup
1174 @item -Bgroup
1175 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1178 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1180
1181 @kindex -Bstatic
1182 @kindex -dn
1183 @kindex -non_shared
1184 @kindex -static
1185 @item -Bstatic
1186 @itemx -dn
1187 @itemx -non_shared
1188 @itemx -static
1189 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1193 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1194 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1198 libraries.
1199
1200 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1201 @item -Bsymbolic
1202 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206 platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
1208 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1211 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1212 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213 libraries.
1214
1215 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223 which support shared libraries.
1224
1225 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
1228 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229 @item --dynamic-list-data
1230 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
1237 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
1241 @kindex --check-sections
1242 @kindex --no-check-sections
1243 @item --check-sections
1244 @itemx --no-check-sections
1245 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1246 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1247 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1250 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1251 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253 option.
1254
1255 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261 command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263 input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266 behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269 libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270 the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271 DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272 required by the output binary. With
1273 @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274 of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275 library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276 symbols.
1277
1278 @cindex cross reference table
1279 @kindex --cref
1280 @item --cref
1281 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
1291 @cindex common allocation
1292 @kindex --no-define-common
1293 @item --no-define-common
1294 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
1309 @cindex symbols, from command line
1310 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1312 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322 @var{expression}.
1323
1324 @cindex demangling, from command line
1325 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1326 @kindex --no-demangle
1327 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1328 @itemx --no-demangle
1329 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1333 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1336 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1338
1339 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1340 @kindex -I@var{file}
1341 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342 @item -I@var{file}
1343 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1344 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347 doing.
1348
1349 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1350 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1351 @item --fatal-warnings
1352 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1355
1356 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357 @item --force-exe-suffix
1358 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367 @kindex --gc-sections
1368 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1369 @cindex garbage collection
1370 @item --gc-sections
1371 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1372 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1373 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1374 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1376
1377 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
1387 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1388 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1389 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
1392 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1393 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394 @cindex garbage collection
1395 @item --print-gc-sections
1396 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402 line.
1403
1404 @cindex help
1405 @cindex usage
1406 @kindex --help
1407 @item --help
1408 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
1410 @kindex --target-help
1411 @item --target-help
1412 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
1414 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1416 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1417 @option{-M} option, above.
1418
1419 @cindex memory usage
1420 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1421 @item --no-keep-memory
1422 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1424 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1425 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1426 while linking a large executable.
1427
1428 @kindex --no-undefined
1429 @kindex -z defs
1430 @item --no-undefined
1431 @itemx -z defs
1432 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1436 libraries being linked in.
1437
1438 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439 @kindex -z muldefs
1440 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1441 @itemx -z muldefs
1442 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444 first definition will be used.
1445
1446 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1447 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1448 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1449 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1450 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1451 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
1456 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459 a shared library.
1460
1461 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462 libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464 @itemize @bullet
1465 @item
1466 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468 resolvable at load time.
1469 @item
1470 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476 appropriate memset function.
1477 @end itemize
1478
1479 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1480 @item --no-undefined-version
1481 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483 will be issued instead.
1484
1485 @kindex --default-symver
1486 @item --default-symver
1487 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1488 exported symbols.
1489
1490 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1491 @item --default-imported-symver
1492 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493 imported symbols.
1494
1495 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1497 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1498 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1500 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1501 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503 inappropriate.
1504
1505 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
1510 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1511 @item --no-whole-archive
1512 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1513 archive files.
1514
1515 @cindex output file after errors
1516 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517 @item --noinhibit-exec
1518 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
1523 @kindex -nostdlib
1524 @item -nostdlib
1525 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
1529 @ifclear SingleFormat
1530 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1532 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1534 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1535 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1537 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543 @end ifclear
1544
1545 @kindex -pie
1546 @kindex --pic-executable
1547 @item -pie
1548 @itemx --pic-executable
1549 @cindex position independent executables
1550 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1553 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1554 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
1557 @kindex -qmagic
1558 @item -qmagic
1559 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561 @kindex -Qy
1562 @item -Qy
1563 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565 @kindex --relax
1566 @cindex synthesizing linker
1567 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1568 @cindex --no-relax
1569 @item --relax
1570 @itemx --no-relax
1571 An option with machine dependent effects.
1572 @ifset GENERIC
1573 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574 @end ifset
1575 @ifset H8300
1576 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1577 @end ifset
1578 @ifset I960
1579 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1580 @end ifset
1581 @ifset XTENSA
1582 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583 @end ifset
1584 @ifset M68HC11
1585 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586 @end ifset
1587 @ifset POWERPC
1588 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589 @end ifset
1590
1591 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595 instructions, and combinig constant values.
1596
1597 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599 @ifset GENERIC
1600 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601 family of processors.
1602 @end ifset
1603
1604 @ifset GENERIC
1605 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606 but ignored.
1607 @end ifset
1608
1609 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
1612 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1613 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1615 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1617 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620 @ifset GENERIC
1621 (such as VxWorks)
1622 @end ifset
1623 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624 run-time memory.
1625
1626 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627 or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632 @ifset GENERIC
1633 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1634 @cindex runtime library search path
1635 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1636 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1637 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1638 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1639 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1640 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1642 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1643 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
1646 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1647 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1648 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1652 file systems.
1653
1654 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1655 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1656 the @option{-rpath} option.
1657 @end ifset
1658
1659 @ifset GENERIC
1660 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1661 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1663 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665 of the input files.
1666
1667 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1670 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1671 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1672 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1673 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674 appearing multiple times.
1675
1676 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679 runtime linker would do.
1680
1681 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1682 libraries:
1683 @enumerate
1684 @item
1685 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1686 @item
1687 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1691 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1694 @item
1695 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1698 @item
1699 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1701 @item
1702 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1704 @item
1705 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709 @item
1710 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711 @item
1712 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714 @end enumerate
1715
1716 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717 warning and continue with the link.
1718 @end ifset
1719
1720 @kindex -shared
1721 @kindex -Bshareable
1722 @item -shared
1723 @itemx -Bshareable
1724 @cindex shared libraries
1725 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1727 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1728 undefined symbols in the link.
1729
1730 @kindex --sort-common
1731 @item --sort-common
1732 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1734 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1740
1741 @kindex --sort-section=name
1742 @item --sort-section=name
1743 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744 patterns in the linker script.
1745
1746 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747 @item --sort-section=alignment
1748 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749 patterns in the linker script.
1750
1751 @kindex --split-by-file
1752 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1753 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1754 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755 size of 1 if not given.
1756
1757 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1758 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1759 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1760 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1761 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1762 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1768 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1769
1770 @kindex --stats
1771 @item --stats
1772 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773 as execution time and memory usage.
1774
1775 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
1781 @kindex --traditional-format
1782 @cindex traditional format
1783 @item --traditional-format
1784 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1786 use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788 @cindex dbx
1789 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1790 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1793 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1794 combine duplicate entries.
1795
1796 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1798 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801 line.
1802 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
1808 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1811 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1812 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1816 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1817
1818 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1820 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822 of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
1824 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827 values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829 @table @samp
1830 @item ignore-all
1831 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1832
1833 @item report-all
1834 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1835
1836 @item ignore-in-object-files
1837 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845 command line.
1846 @end table
1847
1848 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853 can change this to a warning.
1854
1855 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1856 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1857 @item --dll-verbose
1858 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1859 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1860 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1861 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1862 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1863
1864 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1865 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1866 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1867 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1868 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1869 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1870 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1871 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1872 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1873 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1874 @xref{WIN32}.
1875
1876 @kindex --warn-common
1877 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1878 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1879 @item --warn-common
1880 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1881 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1882 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1883 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1884 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1885 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1886
1887 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1888
1889 @table @samp
1890 @item int i = 1;
1891 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1892 file.
1893
1894 @item extern int i;
1895 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1896 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1897 variable somewhere.
1898
1899 @item int i;
1900 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1901 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1902 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1903 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1904 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1905 a definition of the same variable.
1906 @end table
1907
1908 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1909 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1910 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1911 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1912 a common symbol.
1913
1914 @enumerate
1915 @item
1916 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1917 definition for the symbol.
1918 @smallexample
1919 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1920 overridden by definition
1921 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1922 @end smallexample
1923
1924 @item
1925 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1926 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1927 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1928 @smallexample
1929 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1930 overriding common
1931 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1932 @end smallexample
1933
1934 @item
1935 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1936 @smallexample
1937 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1938 of `@var{symbol}'
1939 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1940 @end smallexample
1941
1942 @item
1943 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1944 @smallexample
1945 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1946 overridden by larger common
1947 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1948 @end smallexample
1949
1950 @item
1951 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1952 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1953 encountered in a different order.
1954 @smallexample
1955 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1956 overriding smaller common
1957 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1958 @end smallexample
1959 @end enumerate
1960
1961 @kindex --warn-constructors
1962 @item --warn-constructors
1963 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1964 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1965 detect the use of global constructors.
1966
1967 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1968 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1969 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1970 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1971 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1972 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1973 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1974 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1975 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1976 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1977 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1978 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1979 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1980
1981 @kindex --warn-once
1982 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1983 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1984 @item --warn-once
1985 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1986 which refers to it.
1987
1988 @kindex --warn-section-align
1989 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1990 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1991 @item --warn-section-align
1992 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1993 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1994 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1995 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1996 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1997
1998 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1999 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2000 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2001
2002 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2003 @item --warn-alternate-em
2004 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2005
2006 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2008 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2009 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2010 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2011
2012 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2013 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2014 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2015 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2016
2017 @kindex --whole-archive
2018 @cindex including an entire archive
2019 @item --whole-archive
2020 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2021 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2022 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2023 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2024 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2025 library. This option may be used more than once.
2026
2027 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2028 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2029 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2030 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2031 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2032
2033 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2034 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2035 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2036 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2037 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2038 @var{symbol}.
2039
2040 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2041 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2042 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2043 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2044
2045 Here is a trivial example:
2046
2047 @smallexample
2048 void *
2049 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2050 @{
2051 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2052 return __real_malloc (c);
2053 @}
2054 @end smallexample
2055
2056 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2057 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2058 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2059 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2060
2061 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2062 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2063 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2064 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2065 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2066
2067 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2068 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2069 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2070 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2071
2072 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2073 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2074 @item --enable-new-dtags
2075 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2076 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2077 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2078 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2079 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2080 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2081 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2082
2083 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2084 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2085 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2086 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2087 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2088 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2089 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2090
2091 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2092 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2093 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2094 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2095 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2096 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2097 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2098
2099 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2100 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2101 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2102 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2103 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2104 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2105
2106 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2107 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2108 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2109 has been used.
2110
2111 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2112 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2113
2114 @kindex --build-id
2115 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2116 @item --build-id
2117 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2118 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2119 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2120 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2121 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2122 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2123 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2124 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2125 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2126 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2127 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2128
2129 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2130 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2131 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2132 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2133 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2134 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2135
2136 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2137 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2138 @end table
2139
2140 @c man end
2141
2142 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2143
2144 @c man begin OPTIONS
2145
2146 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2147 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2148 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2149 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2150 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2151 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2152 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2153 object file).
2154
2155 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2156 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2157 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2158 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2159
2160 @table @gcctabopt
2161
2162 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2163 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2164 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2165 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2166 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2167
2168 @kindex --base-file
2169 @item --base-file @var{file}
2170 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2171 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2172 @file{dlltool}.
2173 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2174
2175 @kindex --dll
2176 @item --dll
2177 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2178 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2179 file.
2180 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2181
2182 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2183 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2184 @item --enable-long-section-names
2185 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2186 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2187 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2188 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2189 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2190 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2191 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2192 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2193 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2194 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2195 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2196 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2197 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2198 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2199 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2200 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2201 image and not stripping symbols.
2202 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2203
2204 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2207 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2208 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2209 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2210 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2211 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2212 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2213 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2214 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2215 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2216 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2217 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2218 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2219 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2220 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2221 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2222
2223 @kindex --leading-underscore
2224 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2225 @item --leading-underscore
2226 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2227 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2228 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2229 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2230
2231 @cindex DLLs, creating
2232 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2233 @item --export-all-symbols
2234 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2235 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2236 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2237 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2238 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2239 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2240 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2241 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2242 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2243 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2244 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2245 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2246 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2247 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2248 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2249 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2250 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2251 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2252 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2253 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2254 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2255 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2256 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2257
2258 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2259 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2260 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2261 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2262 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2263
2264 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2265 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2266 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2267 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2268
2269 @kindex --file-alignment
2270 @item --file-alignment
2271 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2272 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2273 512.
2274 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2275
2276 @cindex heap size
2277 @kindex --heap
2278 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2279 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2280 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2281 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2282 committed.
2283 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2284
2285 @cindex image base
2286 @kindex --image-base
2287 @item --image-base @var{value}
2288 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2289 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2290 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2291 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2292 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2293 for dlls.
2294 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2295
2296 @kindex --kill-at
2297 @item --kill-at
2298 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2299 symbols before they are exported.
2300 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2301
2302 @kindex --large-address-aware
2303 @item --large-address-aware
2304 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2305 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2306 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2307 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2308 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2309 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2310
2311 @kindex --major-image-version
2312 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2313 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2314 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2315
2316 @kindex --major-os-version
2317 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2318 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2319 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2320
2321 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2322 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2323 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2324 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2325
2326 @kindex --minor-image-version
2327 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2328 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2329 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2330
2331 @kindex --minor-os-version
2332 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2333 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2334 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2335
2336 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2337 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2338 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2339 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2340
2341 @cindex DEF files, creating
2342 @cindex DLLs, creating
2343 @kindex --output-def
2344 @item --output-def @var{file}
2345 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2346 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2347 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2348 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2349 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2350 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2351
2352 @cindex DLLs, creating
2353 @kindex --out-implib
2354 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2355 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2356 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2357 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2358 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2359 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2360 creation step.
2361 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2362
2363 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2364 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2365 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2366 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2367 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2368 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2369 avoided.
2370 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2371
2372 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2373 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2374 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2375 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2376 default.
2377 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2378
2379 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2380 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2381 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2382 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2383 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2384 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2385 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2386 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2387 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2388 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2389
2390 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2391 @item --enable-auto-import
2392 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2393 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2394 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2395 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2396 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2397 specification published by Microsoft.
2398
2399 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2400 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2401 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2402 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2403 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2404
2405 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2406 see this message:
2407
2408 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2409 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2410
2411 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2412 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2413 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2414 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2415 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2416 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2417 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2418 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2419 the warning, and exit.
2420
2421 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2422 data type of the exported variable:
2423
2424 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2425 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2426 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2427
2428 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2429 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2430 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2431 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2432
2433 @example
2434 extern type extern_array[];
2435 extern_array[1] -->
2436 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2437 @end example
2438
2439 or
2440
2441 @example
2442 extern type extern_array[];
2443 extern_array[1] -->
2444 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2445 @end example
2446
2447 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2448 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2449
2450 @example
2451 extern struct s extern_struct;
2452 extern_struct.field -->
2453 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2454 @end example
2455
2456 or
2457
2458 @example
2459 extern long long extern_ll;
2460 extern_ll -->
2461 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2462 @end example
2463
2464 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2465 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2466 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2467 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2468 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2469 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2470 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2471 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2472
2473 Original:
2474 @example
2475 --foo.h
2476 extern int arr[];
2477 --foo.c
2478 #include "foo.h"
2479 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2480 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2481 @}
2482 @end example
2483
2484 Solution 1:
2485 @example
2486 --foo.h
2487 extern int arr[];
2488 --foo.c
2489 #include "foo.h"
2490 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2491 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2492 volatile int *parr = arr;
2493 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2494 @}
2495 @end example
2496
2497 Solution 2:
2498 @example
2499 --foo.h
2500 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2501 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2502 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2503 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2504 #else
2505 #define FOO_IMPORT
2506 #endif
2507 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2508 --foo.c
2509 #include "foo.h"
2510 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2511 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2512 @}
2513 @end example
2514
2515 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2516 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2517 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2518 functions).
2519 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2520
2521 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2522 @item --disable-auto-import
2523 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2524 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2526
2527 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2529 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2530 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2531 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2532 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2533 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2534
2535 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2537 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2538 DLLs. This is the default.
2539 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2540
2541 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2543 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2544 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2545
2546 @kindex --section-alignment
2547 @item --section-alignment
2548 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2549 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2550 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2551
2552 @cindex stack size
2553 @kindex --stack
2554 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2555 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2556 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2557 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2558 committed.
2559 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2560
2561 @kindex --subsystem
2562 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2563 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2564 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2565 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2566 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2567 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2568 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2569 @var{which}.
2570 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2571
2572 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2573 of the PE file header:
2574 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2575
2576 @kindex --dynamicbase
2577 @item --dynamicbase
2578 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2579 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2580 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2581
2582 @kindex --forceinteg
2583 @item --forceinteg
2584 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2585
2586 @kindex --nxcompat
2587 @item --nxcompat
2588 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2589 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2590
2591 @kindex --no-isolation
2592 @item --no-isolation
2593 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2594
2595 @kindex --no-seh
2596 @item --no-seh
2597 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2598 this image.
2599
2600 @kindex --no-bind
2601 @item --no-bind
2602 Do not bind this image.
2603
2604 @kindex --wdmdriver
2605 @item --wdmdriver
2606 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2607
2608 @kindex --tsaware
2609 @item --tsaware
2610 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2611
2612 @end table
2613
2614 @c man end
2615
2616 @ifset C6X
2617 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2618
2619 @c man begin OPTIONS
2620
2621 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2622 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2623 all executables use an index of 0.
2624
2625 @table @gcctabopt
2626
2627 @kindex --dsbt-size
2628 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2629 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2630 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2631 entries.
2632
2633 @kindex --dsbt-index
2634 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2635 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2636 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2637 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2638 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2639
2640 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2641 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2642 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2643
2644 @end table
2645
2646 @c man end
2647 @end ifset
2648
2649 @ifset M68HC11
2650 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2651
2652 @c man begin OPTIONS
2653
2654 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2655 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2656
2657 @table @gcctabopt
2658
2659 @kindex --no-trampoline
2660 @item --no-trampoline
2661 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2662 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2663 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2664
2665 @kindex --bank-window
2666 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2667 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2668 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2669 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2670 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2671
2672 @end table
2673
2674 @c man end
2675 @end ifset
2676
2677 @ifset M68K
2678 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2679
2680 @c man begin OPTIONS
2681
2682 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2683 when linking for 68K targets.
2684
2685 @table @gcctabopt
2686
2687 @kindex --got
2688 @item --got=@var{type}
2689 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2690 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2691 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2692 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2693
2694 @end table
2695
2696 @c man end
2697 @end ifset
2698
2699 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2700 @node Environment
2701 @section Environment Variables
2702
2703 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2704
2705 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2706 @ifclear SingleFormat
2707 @code{GNUTARGET},
2708 @end ifclear
2709 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2710
2711 @ifclear SingleFormat
2712 @kindex GNUTARGET
2713 @cindex default input format
2714 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2715 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2716 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2717 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2718 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2719 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2720 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2721 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2722 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2723 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2724 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2725 @end ifclear
2726
2727 @kindex LDEMULATION
2728 @cindex default emulation
2729 @cindex emulation, default
2730 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2731 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2732 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2733 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2734 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2735 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2736 linker was configured.
2737
2738 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2739 @cindex demangling, default
2740 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2741 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2742 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2743 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2744 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2745 options.
2746
2747 @c man end
2748 @end ifset
2749
2750 @node Scripts
2751 @chapter Linker Scripts
2752
2753 @cindex scripts
2754 @cindex linker scripts
2755 @cindex command files
2756 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2757 written in the linker command language.
2758
2759 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2760 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2761 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2762 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2763 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2764 described below.
2765
2766 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2767 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2768 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2769 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2770 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2771
2772 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2773 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2774 default linker script.
2775
2776 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2777 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2778 Linker Scripts}.
2779
2780 @menu
2781 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2782 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2783 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2784 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2785 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2786 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2787 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2788 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2789 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2790 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2791 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2792 @end menu
2793
2794 @node Basic Script Concepts
2795 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2796 @cindex linker script concepts
2797 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2798 describe the linker script language.
2799
2800 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2801 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2802 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2803 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2804 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2805 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2806 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2807 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2808
2809 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2810 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2811 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2812 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2813 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2814 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2815 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2816 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2817 of debugging information.
2818
2819 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2820 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2821 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2822 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2823 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2824 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2825 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2826 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2827 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2828 RAM address would be the VMA.
2829
2830 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2831 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2832
2833 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2834 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2835 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2836 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2837 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2838 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2839 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2840
2841 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2842 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2843 option.
2844
2845 @node Script Format
2846 @section Linker Script Format
2847 @cindex linker script format
2848 Linker scripts are text files.
2849
2850 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2851 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2852 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2853 generally ignored.
2854
2855 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2856 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2857 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2858 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2859 file name.
2860
2861 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2862 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2863 to whitespace.
2864
2865 @node Simple Example
2866 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2867 @cindex linker script example
2868 @cindex example of linker script
2869 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2870
2871 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2872 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2873 memory layout of the output file.
2874
2875 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2876 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2877 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2878 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2879 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2880 your input files.
2881
2882 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2883 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2884 linker script which will do that:
2885 @smallexample
2886 SECTIONS
2887 @{
2888 . = 0x10000;
2889 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2890 . = 0x8000000;
2891 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2892 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2893 @}
2894 @end smallexample
2895
2896 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2897 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2898 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2899
2900 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2901 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2902 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2903 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2904 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2905 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2906 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2907
2908 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2909 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2910 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2911 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2912 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2913 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2914
2915 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2916 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2917 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2918
2919 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2920 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2921 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2922 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2923 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2924 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2925 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2926
2927 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2928 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2929 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2930 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2931 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2932 sections.
2933
2934 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2935
2936 @node Simple Commands
2937 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2938 @cindex linker script simple commands
2939 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2940
2941 @menu
2942 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2943 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2944 @ifclear SingleFormat
2945 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2946 @end ifclear
2947
2948 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2949 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2950 @end menu
2951
2952 @node Entry Point
2953 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2954 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2955 @cindex start of execution
2956 @cindex first instruction
2957 @cindex entry point
2958 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2959 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2960 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2961 @smallexample
2962 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2963 @end smallexample
2964
2965 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2966 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2967 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2968 @itemize @bullet
2969 @item
2970 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2971 @item
2972 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2973 @item
2974 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2975 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2976 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
2977 @item
2978 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2979 @item
2980 The address @code{0}.
2981 @end itemize
2982
2983 @node File Commands
2984 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2985 @cindex linker script file commands
2986 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2987
2988 @table @code
2989 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2990 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2991 @cindex including a linker script
2992 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2993 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2994 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
2995 10 levels deep.
2996
2997 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2998 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2999
3000 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3001 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3002 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3003 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3004 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3005 @cindex linker script input object files
3006 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3007 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3008
3009 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3010 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3011 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3012
3013 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3014 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3015
3016 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3017 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3018 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3019 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3020 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3021 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3022 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3023
3024 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3025 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3026 @samp{-l}.
3027
3028 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3029 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3030 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3031
3032 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3033 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3034 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3035 @cindex grouping input files
3036 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3037 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3038 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3039 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3040
3041 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3042 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3043 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3044 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3045 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3046 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3047 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3048 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3049 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3050 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3051 setting afterwards.
3052
3053 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3054 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3055 @cindex output file name in linker script
3056 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3057 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3058 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3059 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3060 precedence.
3061
3062 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3063 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3064
3065 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3066 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3067 @cindex library search path in linker script
3068 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3069 @cindex search path in linker script
3070 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3071 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3072 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3073 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3074 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3075 the command line option are searched first.
3076
3077 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3078 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3079 @cindex first input file
3080 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3081 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3082 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3083 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3084 first file.
3085 @end table
3086
3087 @ifclear SingleFormat
3088 @node Format Commands
3089 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3090 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3091
3092 @table @code
3093 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3094 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3095 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3096 @cindex output file format in linker script
3097 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3098 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3099 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3100 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3101 line option takes precedence.
3102
3103 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3104 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3105 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3106 desired endianness.
3107
3108 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3109 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3110 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3111 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3112
3113 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3114 command:
3115 @smallexample
3116 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3117 @end smallexample
3118 This says that the default format for the output file is
3119 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3120 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3121 format.
3122
3123 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3124 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3125 @cindex input file format in linker script
3126 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3127 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3128 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3129 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3130 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3131 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3132 @end table
3133 @end ifclear
3134
3135 @node REGION_ALIAS
3136 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3137 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3138 @cindex region alias
3139 @cindex region names
3140
3141 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3142 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3143
3144 @smallexample
3145 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3146 @end smallexample
3147
3148 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3149 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3150 to memory regions. An example follows.
3151
3152 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3153 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3154 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3155 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3156 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3157 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3158 sections:
3159
3160 @itemize @bullet
3161 @item
3162 @code{.text} program code;
3163 @item
3164 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3165 @item
3166 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3167 @item
3168 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3169 @end itemize
3170
3171 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3172 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3173 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3174 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3175 @code{C}:
3176 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3177 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3178 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3179 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3180 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3181 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3182 @end multitable
3183 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3184 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3185 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3186 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3187
3188 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3189 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3190 memory layout:
3191 @smallexample
3192 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3193
3194 SECTIONS
3195 @{
3196 .text :
3197 @{
3198 *(.text)
3199 @} > REGION_TEXT
3200 .rodata :
3201 @{
3202 *(.rodata)
3203 rodata_end = .;
3204 @} > REGION_RODATA
3205 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3206 @{
3207 data_start = .;
3208 *(.data)
3209 @} > REGION_DATA
3210 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3211 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3212 .bss :
3213 @{
3214 *(.bss)
3215 @} > REGION_BSS
3216 @}
3217 @end smallexample
3218
3219 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3220 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3221 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3222 @table @code
3223 @item A
3224 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3225 @smallexample
3226 MEMORY
3227 @{
3228 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3229 @}
3230
3231 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3232 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3233 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3234 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3235 @end smallexample
3236 @item B
3237 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3238 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3239 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3240 @smallexample
3241 MEMORY
3242 @{
3243 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3244 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3245 @}
3246
3247 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3248 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3249 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3250 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3251 @end smallexample
3252 @item C
3253 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3254 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3255 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3256 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3257 @smallexample
3258 MEMORY
3259 @{
3260 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3261 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3262 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3263 @}
3264
3265 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3266 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3267 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3268 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3269 @end smallexample
3270 @end table
3271
3272 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3273 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3274 necessary:
3275 @smallexample
3276 #include <string.h>
3277
3278 extern char data_start [];
3279 extern char data_size [];
3280 extern char data_load_start [];
3281
3282 void copy_data(void)
3283 @{
3284 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3285 @{
3286 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3287 @}
3288 @}
3289 @end smallexample
3290
3291 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3292 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3293 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3294
3295 @table @code
3296 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3297 @kindex ASSERT
3298 @cindex assertion in linker script
3299 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3300 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3301
3302 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3303 @kindex EXTERN
3304 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3305 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3306 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3307 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3308 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3309 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3310
3311 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3312 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3313 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3314 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3315 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3316 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3317
3318 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3319 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3320 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3321 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3322 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3323 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3324
3325 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3326 @kindex INSERT
3327 @cindex insert user script into default script
3328 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3329 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3330 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3331 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3332 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3333 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3334 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3335 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3336 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3337 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3338 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3339 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3340 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3341
3342 @smallexample
3343 SECTIONS
3344 @{
3345 OVERLAY :
3346 @{
3347 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3348 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3349 @}
3350 @}
3351 INSERT AFTER .text;
3352 @end smallexample
3353
3354 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3355 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3356 @cindex cross references
3357 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3358 references among certain output sections.
3359
3360 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3361 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3362 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3363 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3364 a function defined in the other section.
3365
3366 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3367 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3368 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3369 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3370 names.
3371
3372 @ifclear SingleFormat
3373 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3374 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3375 @cindex machine architecture
3376 @cindex architecture
3377 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3378 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3379 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3380 the @samp{-f} option.
3381 @end ifclear
3382
3383 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3384 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3385 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3386 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3387 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3388 @xref{Expression Section}.
3389 @end table
3390
3391 @node Assignments
3392 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3393 @cindex assignment in scripts
3394 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3395 @cindex variables, defining
3396 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3397 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3398
3399 @menu
3400 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3401 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3402 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3403 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3404 @end menu
3405
3406 @node Simple Assignments
3407 @subsection Simple Assignments
3408
3409 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3410
3411 @table @code
3412 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3413 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3414 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3415 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3416 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3417 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3418 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3419 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3420 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3421 @end table
3422
3423 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3424 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3425 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3426
3427 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3428 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3429
3430 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3431
3432 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3433
3434 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3435 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3436 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3437
3438 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3439 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3440
3441 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3442 assignments may be used:
3443
3444 @smallexample
3445 floating_point = 0;
3446 SECTIONS
3447 @{
3448 .text :
3449 @{
3450 *(.text)
3451 _etext = .;
3452 @}
3453 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3454 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3455 @}
3456 @end smallexample
3457 @noindent
3458 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3459 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3460 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3461 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3462 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3463
3464 @node PROVIDE
3465 @subsection PROVIDE
3466 @cindex PROVIDE
3467 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3468 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3469 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3470 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3471 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3472 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3473 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3474 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3475
3476 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3477 @smallexample
3478 SECTIONS
3479 @{
3480 .text :
3481 @{
3482 *(.text)
3483 _etext = .;
3484 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3485 @}
3486 @}
3487 @end smallexample
3488
3489 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3490 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3491 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3492 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3493 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3494 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3495
3496 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3497 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3498 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3499 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3500 hidden and won't be exported.
3501
3502 @node Source Code Reference
3503 @subsection Source Code Reference
3504
3505 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3506 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3507 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3508 symbol that does not have a value.
3509
3510 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3511 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3512 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3513 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3514 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3515 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3516 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3517 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3518
3519 @smallexample
3520 extern int foo;
3521 @end smallexample
3522
3523 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3524
3525 @smallexample
3526 _foo = 1000;
3527 @end smallexample
3528
3529 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3530 transformation has taken place.
3531
3532 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3533 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3534 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3535 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3536 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3537 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3538 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3539
3540 @smallexample
3541 int foo = 1000;
3542 @end smallexample
3543
3544 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3545 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3546 number 1000 is initially stored.
3547
3548 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3549 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3550 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3551 So:
3552
3553 @smallexample
3554 foo = 1;
3555 @end smallexample
3556
3557 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3558 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3559 address. Whereas:
3560
3561 @smallexample
3562 int * a = & foo;
3563 @end smallexample
3564
3565 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3566 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3567 the variable @samp{a}.
3568
3569 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3570 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3571 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3572
3573 @smallexample
3574 foo = 1000;
3575 @end smallexample
3576
3577 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3578 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3579 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3580 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3581 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3582
3583 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3584 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3585 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3586 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3587 linker script contains these declarations:
3588
3589 @smallexample
3590 @group
3591 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3592 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3593 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3594 @end group
3595 @end smallexample
3596
3597 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3598
3599 @smallexample
3600 @group
3601 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3602
3603 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3604 @end group
3605 @end smallexample
3606
3607 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3608
3609 @node SECTIONS
3610 @section SECTIONS Command
3611 @kindex SECTIONS
3612 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3613 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3614
3615 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3616 @smallexample
3617 SECTIONS
3618 @{
3619 @var{sections-command}
3620 @var{sections-command}
3621 @dots{}
3622 @}
3623 @end smallexample
3624
3625 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3626
3627 @itemize @bullet
3628 @item
3629 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3630 @item
3631 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3632 @item
3633 an output section description
3634 @item
3635 an overlay description
3636 @end itemize
3637
3638 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3639 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3640 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3641 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3642 the layout of the output file.
3643
3644 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3645 below.
3646
3647 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3648 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3649 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3650 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3651 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3652 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3653
3654 @menu
3655 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3656 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3657 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3658 * Input Section:: Input section description
3659 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3660 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3661 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3662 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3663 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3664 @end menu
3665
3666 @node Output Section Description
3667 @subsection Output Section Description
3668 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3669 @smallexample
3670 @group
3671 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3672 [AT(@var{lma})]
3673 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3674 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3675 [@var{constraint}]
3676 @{
3677 @var{output-section-command}
3678 @var{output-section-command}
3679 @dots{}
3680 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3681 @end group
3682 @end smallexample
3683
3684 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3685
3686 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3687 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3688 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3689
3690 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3691
3692 @itemize @bullet
3693 @item
3694 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3695 @item
3696 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3697 @item
3698 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3699 @item
3700 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3701 @end itemize
3702
3703 @node Output Section Name
3704 @subsection Output Section Name
3705 @cindex name, section
3706 @cindex section name
3707 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3708 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3709 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3710 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3711 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3712 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3713 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3714 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3715 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3716 commas must be quoted.
3717
3718 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3719 Discarding}.
3720
3721 @node Output Section Address
3722 @subsection Output Section Address
3723 @cindex address, section
3724 @cindex section address
3725 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3726 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3727 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3728
3729 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3730 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3731 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3732 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3733 contained within the output section.
3734
3735 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3736
3737 @itemize @bullet
3738 @item
3739 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3740 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3741 in that region.
3742
3743 @item
3744 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3745 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3746 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3747 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3748
3749 @item
3750 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3751 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3752 counter.
3753 @end itemize
3754
3755 @noindent
3756 For example:
3757
3758 @smallexample
3759 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3760 @end smallexample
3761
3762 @noindent
3763 and
3764
3765 @smallexample
3766 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3767 @end smallexample
3768
3769 @noindent
3770 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3771 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3772 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3773 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3774 input sections.
3775
3776 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3777 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3778 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3779 do something like this:
3780 @smallexample
3781 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3782 @end smallexample
3783 @noindent
3784 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3785 aligned upward to the specified value.
3786
3787 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3788 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3789 sections are ignored).
3790
3791 @node Input Section
3792 @subsection Input Section Description
3793 @cindex input sections
3794 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3795 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3796
3797 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3798 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3799 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3800 map the input files into your memory layout.
3801
3802 @menu
3803 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3804 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3805 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3806 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3807 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3808 @end menu
3809
3810 @node Input Section Basics
3811 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3812 @cindex input section basics
3813 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3814 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3815
3816 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3817 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3818
3819 The most common input section description is to include all input
3820 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3821 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3822 @smallexample
3823 *(.text)
3824 @end smallexample
3825 @noindent
3826 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3827 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3828 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3829 example:
3830 @smallexample
3831 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3832 @end smallexample
3833 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3834 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3835
3836 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3837 @smallexample
3838 *(.text .rdata)
3839 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3840 @end smallexample
3841 @noindent
3842 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3843 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3844 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3845 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3846 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3847 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3848
3849 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3850 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3851 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3852 @smallexample
3853 data.o(.data)
3854 @end smallexample
3855
3856 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3857 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3858 with no whitespace around the colon.
3859
3860 @table @samp
3861 @item archive:file
3862 matches file within archive
3863 @item archive:
3864 matches the whole archive
3865 @item :file
3866 matches file but not one in an archive
3867 @end table
3868
3869 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3870 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3871 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3872 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3873 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3874 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3875 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3876 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3877 command.
3878
3879 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3880 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3881 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3882 @smallexample
3883 data.o
3884 @end smallexample
3885
3886 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3887 and does not contain any wild card
3888 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3889 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3890 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3891 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3892 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3893 the archive search path.
3894
3895 @node Input Section Wildcards
3896 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3897 @cindex input section wildcards
3898 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3899 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3900 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3901 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3902 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3903
3904 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3905 pattern for the file name.
3906
3907 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3908
3909 @table @samp
3910 @item *
3911 matches any number of characters
3912 @item ?
3913 matches any single character
3914 @item [@var{chars}]
3915 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3916 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3917 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3918 @item \
3919 quotes the following character
3920 @end table
3921
3922 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3923 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3924 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3925 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3926 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3927 a @samp{/} character.
3928
3929 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3930 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3931 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3932
3933 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3934 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3935 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3936 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3937 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3938 @smallexample
3939 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3940 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3941 @end smallexample
3942
3943 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3944 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3945 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3946 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3947 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3948 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3949 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3950
3951 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3952 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3953 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3954 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3955
3956 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3957 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3958 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3959 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3960 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3961
3962 @cindex SORT
3963 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3964
3965 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3966 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3967
3968 @enumerate
3969 @item
3970 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3971 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3972 sections have the same name.
3973 @item
3974 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3975 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3976 sections have the same alignment.
3977 @item
3978 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3979 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3980 @item
3981 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3982 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3983 @item
3984 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3985 @end enumerate
3986
3987 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3988 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3989 takes precedence over the command line option.
3990
3991 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3992 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3993 treated as nested sorting command.
3994
3995 @enumerate
3996 @item
3997 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3998 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3999 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4000 @item
4001 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4002 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4003 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4004 @end enumerate
4005
4006 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4007 command line option will be ignored.
4008
4009 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4010 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4011 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4012
4013 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4014 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4015 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4016 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4017 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4018 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4019 @smallexample
4020 @group
4021 SECTIONS @{
4022 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4023 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4024 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4025 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4026 @}
4027 @end group
4028 @end smallexample
4029
4030 @node Input Section Common
4031 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4032 @cindex common symbol placement
4033 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4034 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4035 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4036 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4037 named @samp{COMMON}.
4038
4039 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4040 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4041 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4042 input files are placed in another section.
4043
4044 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4045 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4046 @smallexample
4047 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4048 @end smallexample
4049
4050 @cindex scommon section
4051 @cindex small common symbols
4052 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4053 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4054 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4055 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4056 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4057 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4058 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4059 locations.
4060
4061 @cindex [COMMON]
4062 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4063 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4064 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4065
4066 @node Input Section Keep
4067 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4068 @cindex KEEP
4069 @cindex garbage collection
4070 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4071 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4072 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4073 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4074 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4075
4076 @node Input Section Example
4077 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4078 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4079 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4080 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4081 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4082 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4083 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4084 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4085 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4086 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4087
4088 @smallexample
4089 @group
4090 SECTIONS @{
4091 outputa 0x10000 :
4092 @{
4093 all.o
4094 foo.o (.input1)
4095 @}
4096 @end group
4097 @group
4098 outputb :
4099 @{
4100 foo.o (.input2)
4101 foo1.o (.input1)
4102 @}
4103 @end group
4104 @group
4105 outputc :
4106 @{
4107 *(.input1)
4108 *(.input2)
4109 @}
4110 @}
4111 @end group
4112 @end smallexample
4113
4114 @node Output Section Data
4115 @subsection Output Section Data
4116 @cindex data
4117 @cindex section data
4118 @cindex output section data
4119 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4120 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4121 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4122 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4123 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4124 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4125 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4126 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4127 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4128 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4129 counter.
4130
4131 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4132 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4133 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4134 stored.
4135
4136 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4137 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4138 @smallexample
4139 BYTE(1)
4140 LONG(addr)
4141 @end smallexample
4142
4143 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4144 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4145 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4146 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4147 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4148
4149 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4150 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4151 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4152 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4153 endianness of the first input object file.
4154
4155 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4156 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4157 @smallexample
4158 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4159 @end smallexample
4160 whereas this will work:
4161 @smallexample
4162 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4163 @end smallexample
4164
4165 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4166 @cindex holes, filling
4167 @cindex unspecified memory
4168 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4169 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4170 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4171 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4172 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4173 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4174 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4175 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4176 different parts of an output section.
4177
4178 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4179 value @samp{0x90}:
4180 @smallexample
4181 FILL(0x90909090)
4182 @end smallexample
4183
4184 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4185 section attribute, but it only affects the
4186 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4187 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4188 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4189 expression.
4190
4191 @node Output Section Keywords
4192 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4193 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4194 commands.
4195
4196 @table @code
4197 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4198 @cindex input filename symbols
4199 @cindex filename symbols
4200 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4201 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4202 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4203 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4204 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4205
4206 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4207 normally used for any other object file format.
4208
4209 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4210 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4211 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4212 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4213 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4214 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4215 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4216 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4217 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4218 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4219 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4220 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4221 ignored for other object file formats.
4222
4223 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4224 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4225 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4226 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4227 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4228 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4229 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4230 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4231 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4232 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4233 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4234 @code{exit}.
4235
4236 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4237 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4238 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4239 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4240 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4241 runtime code expects to see.
4242
4243 @smallexample
4244 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4245 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4246 *(.ctors)
4247 LONG(0)
4248 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4249 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4250 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4251 *(.dtors)
4252 LONG(0)
4253 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4254 @end smallexample
4255
4256 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4257 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4258 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4259 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4260 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4261 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4262 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4263 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4264
4265 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4266 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4267 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4268 scripts.
4269
4270 @end table
4271
4272 @node Output Section Discarding
4273 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4274 @cindex discarding sections
4275 @cindex sections, discarding
4276 @cindex removing sections
4277 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4278 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4279 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4280 @smallexample
4281 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4282 @end smallexample
4283 @noindent
4284 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4285 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4286 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4287 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4288
4289 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4290 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4291 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4292 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4293 section is discarded.
4294
4295 @cindex /DISCARD/
4296 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4297 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4298 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4299
4300 @node Output Section Attributes
4301 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4302 @cindex output section attributes
4303 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4304 like this:
4305
4306 @smallexample
4307 @group
4308 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4309 [AT(@var{lma})]
4310 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4311 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4312 [@var{constraint}]
4313 @{
4314 @var{output-section-command}
4315 @var{output-section-command}
4316 @dots{}
4317 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4318 @end group
4319 @end smallexample
4320
4321 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4322 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4323 remaining section attributes.
4324
4325 @menu
4326 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4327 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4328 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4329 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4330 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4331 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4332 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4333 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4334 @end menu
4335
4336 @node Output Section Type
4337 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4338 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4339 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4340
4341 @table @code
4342 @item NOLOAD
4343 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4344 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4345 @item DSECT
4346 @itemx COPY
4347 @itemx INFO
4348 @itemx OVERLAY
4349 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4350 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4351 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4352 section when the program is run.
4353 @end table
4354
4355 @kindex NOLOAD
4356 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4357 @cindex loading, preventing
4358 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4359 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4360 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4361 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4362 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4363 @smallexample
4364 @group
4365 SECTIONS @{
4366 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4367 @dots{}
4368 @}
4369 @end group
4370 @end smallexample
4371
4372 @node Output Section LMA
4373 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4374 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4375 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4376 @cindex load address
4377 @cindex section load address
4378 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4379 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4380 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4381 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4382 address is optional.
4383
4384 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4385 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4386 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4387 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4388 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4389
4390 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4391 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4392 load address:
4393
4394 @itemize @bullet
4395 @item
4396 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4397 the LMA address as well.
4398
4399 @item
4400 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4401
4402 @item
4403 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4404 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4405 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4406 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4407 the last section in the located region.
4408
4409 @item
4410 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4411 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4412
4413 @item
4414 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4415 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4416 @end itemize
4417
4418 @cindex ROM initialized data
4419 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4420 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4421 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4422 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4423 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4424 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4425 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4426 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4427 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4428
4429 @smallexample
4430 @group
4431 SECTIONS
4432 @{
4433 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4434 .mdata 0x2000 :
4435 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4436 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4437 .bss 0x3000 :
4438 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4439 @}
4440 @end group
4441 @end smallexample
4442
4443 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4444 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4445 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4446 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4447 script.
4448
4449 @smallexample
4450 @group
4451 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4452 char *src = &_etext;
4453 char *dst = &_data;
4454
4455 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4456 while (dst < &_edata)
4457 *dst++ = *src++;
4458
4459 /* Zero bss. */
4460 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4461 *dst = 0;
4462 @end group
4463 @end smallexample
4464
4465 @node Forced Output Alignment
4466 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4467 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4468 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4469 @cindex output section alignment
4470 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4471
4472 @node Forced Input Alignment
4473 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4474 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4475 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4476 @cindex input section alignment
4477 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4478 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4479 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4480
4481 @node Output Section Constraint
4482 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4483 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4484 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4485 @cindex constraints on output sections
4486 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4487 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4488 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4489 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4490
4491 @node Output Section Region
4492 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4493 @kindex >@var{region}
4494 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4495 @cindex memory regions and sections
4496 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4497 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4498
4499 Here is a simple example:
4500 @smallexample
4501 @group
4502 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4503 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4504 @end group
4505 @end smallexample
4506
4507 @node Output Section Phdr
4508 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4509 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4510 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4511 @cindex program headers and sections
4512 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4513 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4514 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4515 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4516 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4517 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4518
4519 Here is a simple example:
4520 @smallexample
4521 @group
4522 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4523 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4524 @end group
4525 @end smallexample
4526
4527 @node Output Section Fill
4528 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4529 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4530 @cindex section fill pattern
4531 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4532 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4533 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4534 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4535 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4536 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4537 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4538 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4539 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4540 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4541 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4542 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4543 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4544
4545 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4546 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4547
4548 Here is a simple example:
4549 @smallexample
4550 @group
4551 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4552 @end group
4553 @end smallexample
4554
4555 @node Overlay Description
4556 @subsection Overlay Description
4557 @kindex OVERLAY
4558 @cindex overlays
4559 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4560 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4561 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4562 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4563 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4564 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4565 than another.
4566
4567 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4568 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4569 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4570 command is as follows:
4571 @smallexample
4572 @group
4573 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4574 @{
4575 @var{secname1}
4576 @{
4577 @var{output-section-command}
4578 @var{output-section-command}
4579 @dots{}
4580 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4581 @var{secname2}
4582 @{
4583 @var{output-section-command}
4584 @var{output-section-command}
4585 @dots{}
4586 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4587 @dots{}
4588 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4589 @end group
4590 @end smallexample
4591
4592 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4593 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4594 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4595 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4596 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4597 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4598
4599 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4600 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4601 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4602 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4603 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4604 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4605
4606 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4607 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4608 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4609 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4610 NOCROSSREFS}.
4611
4612 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4613 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4614 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4615 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4616 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4617 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4618 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4619
4620 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4621 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4622
4623 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4624 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4625 @smallexample
4626 @group
4627 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4628 @{
4629 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4630 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4631 @}
4632 @end group
4633 @end smallexample
4634 @noindent
4635 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4636 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4637 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4638 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4639 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4640 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4641
4642 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4643 like the following.
4644
4645 @smallexample
4646 @group
4647 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4648 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4649 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4650 @end group
4651 @end smallexample
4652
4653 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4654 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4655 example could have been written identically as follows.
4656
4657 @smallexample
4658 @group
4659 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4660 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4661 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4662 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4663 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4664 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4665 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4666 @end group
4667 @end smallexample
4668
4669 @node MEMORY
4670 @section MEMORY Command
4671 @kindex MEMORY
4672 @cindex memory regions
4673 @cindex regions of memory
4674 @cindex allocating memory
4675 @cindex discontinuous memory
4676 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4677 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4678
4679 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4680 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4681 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4682 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4683 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4684 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4685 around to fit into the available regions.
4686
4687 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4688 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4689 you wish. The syntax is:
4690 @smallexample
4691 @group
4692 MEMORY
4693 @{
4694 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4695 @dots{}
4696 @}
4697 @end group
4698 @end smallexample
4699
4700 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4701 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4702 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4703 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4704 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4705 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4706 command.
4707
4708 @cindex memory region attributes
4709 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4710 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4711 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4712 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4713 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4714 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4715 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4716
4717 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4718 @table @samp
4719 @item R
4720 Read-only section
4721 @item W
4722 Read/write section
4723 @item X
4724 Executable section
4725 @item A
4726 Allocatable section
4727 @item I
4728 Initialized section
4729 @item L
4730 Same as @samp{I}
4731 @item !
4732 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4733 @end table
4734
4735 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4736 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4737 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4738 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4739 attributes.
4740
4741 @kindex ORIGIN =
4742 @kindex o =
4743 @kindex org =
4744 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4745 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4746 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4747 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4748 @code{ORG}).
4749
4750 @kindex LENGTH =
4751 @kindex len =
4752 @kindex l =
4753 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4754 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4755 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4756 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4757
4758 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4759 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4760 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4761 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4762 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4763 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4764 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4765 region.
4766
4767 @smallexample
4768 @group
4769 MEMORY
4770 @{
4771 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4772 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4773 @}
4774 @end group
4775 @end smallexample
4776
4777 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4778 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4779 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4780 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4781 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4782 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4783 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4784 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4785 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4786
4787 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4788 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4789 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4790
4791 @smallexample
4792 @group
4793 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4794 @end group
4795 @end smallexample
4796
4797 @node PHDRS
4798 @section PHDRS Command
4799 @kindex PHDRS
4800 @cindex program headers
4801 @cindex ELF program headers
4802 @cindex program segments
4803 @cindex segments, ELF
4804 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4805 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4806 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4807 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4808
4809 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4810 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4811 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4812 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4813 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4814
4815 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4816 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4817 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4818 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4819 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4820
4821 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4822 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4823 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4824
4825 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4826 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4827
4828 @smallexample
4829 @group
4830 PHDRS
4831 @{
4832 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4833 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4834 @}
4835 @end group
4836 @end smallexample
4837
4838 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4839 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4840 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4841 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4842 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4843 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4844
4845 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4846 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4847 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4848 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4849 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4850 Section Phdr}.
4851
4852 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4853 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4854 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4855 contain the section.
4856
4857 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4858 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4859 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4860 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4861 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4862 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4863 segment at all.
4864
4865 @kindex FILEHDR
4866 @kindex PHDRS
4867 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4868 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4869 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4870 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4871 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4872 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4873 these keywords.
4874
4875 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4876 value of the keyword.
4877
4878 @table @asis
4879 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4880 Indicates an unused program header.
4881
4882 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4883 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4884 the file.
4885
4886 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4887 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4888
4889 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4890 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4891 found.
4892
4893 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4894 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4895
4896 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4897 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4898 ABI.
4899
4900 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4901 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4902
4903 @item @var{expression}
4904 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4905 be used for types not defined above.
4906 @end table
4907
4908 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4909 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4910 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4911 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4912 output section attribute.
4913
4914 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4915 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4916 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4917 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4918 header.
4919
4920 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4921 headers used on a native ELF system.
4922
4923 @example
4924 @group
4925 PHDRS
4926 @{
4927 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4928 interp PT_INTERP ;
4929 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4930 data PT_LOAD ;
4931 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4932 @}
4933
4934 SECTIONS
4935 @{
4936 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4937 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4938 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4939 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4940 @dots{}
4941 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4942 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4943 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4944 @dots{}
4945 @}
4946 @end group
4947 @end example
4948
4949 @node VERSION
4950 @section VERSION Command
4951 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4952 @cindex symbol versions
4953 @cindex version script
4954 @cindex versions of symbols
4955 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4956 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4957 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4958 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4959 shared library.
4960
4961 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4962 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4963 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4964
4965 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4966 @smallexample
4967 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4968 @end smallexample
4969
4970 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4971 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4972 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4973 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4974 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4975 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4976 library.
4977
4978 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4979 examples.
4980
4981 @smallexample
4982 VERS_1.1 @{
4983 global:
4984 foo1;
4985 local:
4986 old*;
4987 original*;
4988 new*;
4989 @};
4990
4991 VERS_1.2 @{
4992 foo2;
4993 @} VERS_1.1;
4994
4995 VERS_2.0 @{
4996 bar1; bar2;
4997 extern "C++" @{
4998 ns::*;
4999 "f(int, double)";
5000 @};
5001 @} VERS_1.2;
5002 @end smallexample
5003
5004 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5005 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5006 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5007 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5008 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5009 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5010 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5011 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5012 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5013 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5014
5015 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5016 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5017 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5018
5019 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5020 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5021 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5022
5023 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5024 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5025 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5026 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5027 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5028 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5029 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5030 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5031 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5032
5033 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5034 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5035 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5036 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5037
5038 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5039 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5040 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5041 won't.
5042
5043 @smallexample
5044 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5045 @end smallexample
5046
5047 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5048 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5049 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5050 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5051 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5052 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5053 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5054 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5055 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5056 search for each symbol reference.
5057
5058 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5059 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5060 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5061 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5062 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5063 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5064 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5065 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5066 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5067
5068 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5069 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5070 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5071 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5072 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5073 @smallexample
5074 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5075 @end smallexample
5076 @noindent
5077 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5078 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5079 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5080 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5081 takes precedence over a version script.
5082
5083 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5084 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5085 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5086 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5087 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5088
5089 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5090 source file. Here is an example:
5091
5092 @smallexample
5093 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5094 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5095 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5096 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5097 @end smallexample
5098
5099 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5100 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5101 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5102 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5103
5104 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5105 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5106 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5107 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5108 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5109 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5110
5111 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5112 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5113 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5114 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5115
5116 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5117
5118 @smallexample
5119 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5120 @end smallexample
5121
5122 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5123 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5124 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5125 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5126 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5127
5128 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5129 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5130 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5131 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5132 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5133 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5134 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5135 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5136 expect when you upgrade.
5137
5138 @node Expressions
5139 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5140 @cindex expressions
5141 @cindex arithmetic
5142 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5143 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5144 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5145 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5146
5147 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5148
5149 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5150 expressions.
5151
5152 @menu
5153 * Constants:: Constants
5154 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5155 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5156 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5157 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5158 * Operators:: Operators
5159 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5160 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5161 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5162 @end menu
5163
5164 @node Constants
5165 @subsection Constants
5166 @cindex integer notation
5167 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5168 All constants are integers.
5169
5170 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5171 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5172 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5173 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5174 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5175 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5176
5177 @cindex scaled integers
5178 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5179 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5180 @cindex suffixes for integers
5181 @cindex integer suffixes
5182 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5183 constant by
5184 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5185 @ifnottex
5186 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5187 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5188 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5189 @end ifnottex
5190 @tex
5191 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5192 @end tex
5193 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5194 respectively. For example, the following
5195 all refer to the same quantity:
5196
5197 @smallexample
5198 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5199 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5200 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5201 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5202 @end smallexample
5203
5204 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5205 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5206
5207 @node Symbolic Constants
5208 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5209 @cindex symbolic constants
5210 @kindex CONSTANT
5211 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5212 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5213
5214 @table @code
5215 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5216 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5217 The target's maximum page size.
5218
5219 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5220 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5221 The target's default page size.
5222 @end table
5223
5224 So for example:
5225
5226 @smallexample
5227 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5228 @end smallexample
5229
5230 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5231 supported by the target.
5232
5233 @node Symbols
5234 @subsection Symbol Names
5235 @cindex symbol names
5236 @cindex names
5237 @cindex quoted symbol names
5238 @kindex "
5239 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5240 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5241 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5242 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5243 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5244 @smallexample
5245 "SECTION" = 9;
5246 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5247 @end smallexample
5248
5249 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5250 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5251 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5252
5253 @node Orphan Sections
5254 @subsection Orphan Sections
5255 @cindex orphan
5256 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5257 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5258 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5259 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5260 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5261 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5262 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5263 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5264 at the end of the file.
5265
5266 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5267 well as section flag.
5268
5269 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5270 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5271 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5272 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5273 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5274 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5275 character.
5276
5277 @node Location Counter
5278 @subsection The Location Counter
5279 @kindex .
5280 @cindex dot
5281 @cindex location counter
5282 @cindex current output location
5283 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5284 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5285 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5286 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5287 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5288
5289 @cindex holes
5290 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5291 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5292 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5293 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5294 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5295
5296 @smallexample
5297 SECTIONS
5298 @{
5299 output :
5300 @{
5301 file1(.text)
5302 . = . + 1000;
5303 file2(.text)
5304 . += 1000;
5305 file3(.text)
5306 @} = 0x12345678;
5307 @}
5308 @end smallexample
5309 @noindent
5310 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5311 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5312 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5313 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5314 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5315 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5316
5317 @cindex dot inside sections
5318 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5319 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5320 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5321 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5322 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5323 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5324
5325 @smallexample
5326 SECTIONS
5327 @{
5328 . = 0x100
5329 .text: @{
5330 *(.text)
5331 . = 0x200
5332 @}
5333 . = 0x500
5334 .data: @{
5335 *(.data)
5336 . += 0x600
5337 @}
5338 @}
5339 @end smallexample
5340
5341 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5342 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5343 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5344 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5345 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5346 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5347 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5348 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5349
5350 @cindex dot outside sections
5351 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5352 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5353 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5354
5355 @smallexample
5356 SECTIONS
5357 @{
5358 start_of_text = . ;
5359 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5360 end_of_text = . ;
5361
5362 start_of_data = . ;
5363 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5364 end_of_data = . ;
5365 @}
5366 @end smallexample
5367
5368 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5369 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5370 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5371 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5372 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5373 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5374 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5375 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5376 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5377 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5378 as follows:
5379
5380 @smallexample
5381 SECTIONS
5382 @{
5383 start_of_text = . ;
5384 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5385 end_of_text = . ;
5386
5387 start_of_data = . ;
5388 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5389 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5390 end_of_data = . ;
5391 @}
5392 @end smallexample
5393
5394 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5395 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5396 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5397 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5398 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5399 section. So you could write:
5400
5401 @smallexample
5402 SECTIONS
5403 @{
5404 start_of_text = . ;
5405 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5406 end_of_text = . ;
5407
5408 . = . ;
5409 start_of_data = . ;
5410 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5411 end_of_data = . ;
5412 @}
5413 @end smallexample
5414
5415 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5416 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5417
5418 @need 2000
5419 @node Operators
5420 @subsection Operators
5421 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5422 @cindex arithmetic operators
5423 @cindex precedence in expressions
5424 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5425 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5426 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5427 @ifnottex
5428 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5429 @smallexample
5430 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5431 (highest)
5432 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5433 2 left * / %
5434 3 left + -
5435 4 left >> <<
5436 5 left == != > < <= >=
5437 6 left &
5438 7 left |
5439 8 left &&
5440 9 left ||
5441 10 right ? :
5442 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5443 (lowest)
5444 @end smallexample
5445 Notes:
5446 (1) Prefix operators
5447 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5448 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5449 @end ifnottex
5450 @tex
5451 \vskip \baselineskip
5452 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5453 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5454 \hrule
5455 \halign
5456 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5457 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5458 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5459 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5460 \noalign{\hrule}
5461 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5462 &highest&&&&&\cr
5463 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5464 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5465 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5466 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5467 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5468 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5469 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5470 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5471 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5472 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5473 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5474 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5475 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5476 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5477 \hrule}
5478 @end tex
5479 @iftex
5480 {
5481 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5482 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5483 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5484 }
5485 @end iftex
5486 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5487
5488 @node Evaluation
5489 @subsection Evaluation
5490 @cindex lazy evaluation
5491 @cindex expression evaluation order
5492 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5493 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5494
5495 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5496 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5497 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5498 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5499
5500 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5501 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5502 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5503 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5504
5505 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5506 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5507 allocation.
5508
5509 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5510 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5511
5512 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5513 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5514 following
5515 @smallexample
5516 @group
5517 SECTIONS
5518 @{
5519 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5520 @{ *(.text) @}
5521 @}
5522 @end group
5523 @end smallexample
5524 @noindent
5525 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5526 address}.
5527
5528 @node Expression Section
5529 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5530 @cindex expression sections
5531 @cindex absolute expressions
5532 @cindex relative expressions
5533 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5534 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5535 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5536 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5537 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5538 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5539 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5540 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5541 operations.
5542
5543 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5544 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5545 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5546 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5547 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5548 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5549 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5550 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5551 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5552 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5553 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5554 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5555 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5556 everywhere.
5557
5558 In the following simple example,
5559
5560 @smallexample
5561 @group
5562 SECTIONS
5563 @{
5564 . = 0x100;
5565 __executable_start = 0x100;
5566 .data :
5567 @{
5568 . = 0x10;
5569 __data_start = 0x10;
5570 *(.data)
5571 @}
5572 @dots{}
5573 @}
5574 @end group
5575 @end smallexample
5576
5577 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5578 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5579 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5580 section in the second two assignments.
5581
5582 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5583 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5584
5585 @itemize @bullet
5586 @item
5587 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5588 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5589 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5590 @item
5591 Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5592 or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5593 same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5594 address before applying the operator.
5595 @end itemize
5596
5597 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5598
5599 @itemize @bullet
5600 @item
5601 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5602 @item
5603 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5604 @item
5605 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5606 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5607 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5608 @item
5609 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5610 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5611 section as the relative operand(s).
5612 @item
5613 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5614 conversions) is an absolute address.
5615 @end itemize
5616
5617 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5618 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5619 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5620 section @samp{.data}:
5621 @smallexample
5622 SECTIONS
5623 @{
5624 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5625 @}
5626 @end smallexample
5627 @noindent
5628 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5629 @samp{.data} section.
5630
5631 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5632 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5633
5634 @node Builtin Functions
5635 @subsection Builtin Functions
5636 @cindex functions in expressions
5637 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5638 use in linker script expressions.
5639
5640 @table @code
5641 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5642 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5643 @cindex expression, absolute
5644 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5645 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5646 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5647 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5648
5649 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5650 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5651 @cindex section address in expression
5652 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5653 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5654 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5655 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5656 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5657 the other two will be absolute:
5658 @smallexample
5659 @group
5660 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5661 .output1 :
5662 @{
5663 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5664 @dots{}
5665 @}
5666 .output :
5667 @{
5668 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5669 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5670 @}
5671 @dots{} @}
5672 @end group
5673 @end smallexample
5674
5675 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5676 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5677 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5678 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5679 @cindex round up location counter
5680 @cindex align location counter
5681 @cindex round up expression
5682 @cindex align expression
5683 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5684 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5685 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5686 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5687 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5688 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5689
5690 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5691 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5692 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5693 input sections:
5694 @smallexample
5695 @group
5696 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5697 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5698 *(.data)
5699 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5700 @}
5701 @dots{} @}
5702 @end group
5703 @end smallexample
5704 @noindent
5705 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5706 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5707 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5708 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5709
5710 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5711
5712 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5713 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5714 @cindex section alignment
5715 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5716 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5717 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5718 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5719 value in that section.
5720 @smallexample
5721 @group
5722 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5723 .output @{
5724 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5725 @dots{}
5726 @}
5727 @dots{} @}
5728 @end group
5729 @end smallexample
5730
5731 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5732 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5733 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5734 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5735 section.
5736
5737 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5738 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5739 This is equivalent to either
5740 @smallexample
5741 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5742 @end smallexample
5743 or
5744 @smallexample
5745 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5746 @end smallexample
5747 @noindent
5748 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5749 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5750 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5751 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5752 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5753 bytes in the on-disk file.
5754
5755 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5756 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5757 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5758 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5759 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5760
5761 @noindent
5762 Example:
5763 @smallexample
5764 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5765 @end smallexample
5766
5767 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5768 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5769 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5770 evaluation purposes.
5771
5772 @smallexample
5773 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5774 @end smallexample
5775
5776 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5777 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5778 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5779 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5780 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5781 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5782 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5783 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5784 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5785 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5786
5787 @smallexample
5788 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5789 @end smallexample
5790
5791 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5792 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5793 @cindex symbol defaults
5794 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5795 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5796 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5797 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5798 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5799 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5800 existed, its value is preserved:
5801
5802 @smallexample
5803 @group
5804 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5805 .text : @{
5806 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5807 @dots{}
5808 @}
5809 @dots{}
5810 @}
5811 @end group
5812 @end smallexample
5813
5814 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5815 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5816 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5817
5818 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5819 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5820 @cindex section load address in expression
5821 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5822 Section LMA}).
5823
5824 @kindex MAX
5825 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5826 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5827
5828 @kindex MIN
5829 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5830 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5831
5832 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5833 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5834 @cindex unallocated address, next
5835 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5836 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5837 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5838 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5839
5840 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5841 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5842 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5843
5844 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5845 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5846 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5847 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5848 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5849 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5850 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5851 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5852 name.
5853
5854 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5855 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5856 @cindex section size
5857 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5858 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5859 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5860 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5861 @smallexample
5862 @group
5863 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5864 .output @{
5865 .start = . ;
5866 @dots{}
5867 .end = . ;
5868 @}
5869 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5870 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5871 @dots{} @}
5872 @end group
5873 @end smallexample
5874
5875 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5876 @itemx sizeof_headers
5877 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5878 @cindex header size
5879 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5880 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5881 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5882 choose, to facilitate paging.
5883
5884 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5885 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5886 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5887 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5888 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5889 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5890 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5891 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5892 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5893 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5894 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5895 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5896 @end table
5897
5898 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5899 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5900 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5901 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5902 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5903 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5904 linker will report an error.
5905
5906 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5907
5908 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5909 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5910 commands.
5911
5912 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5913 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5914 read. This can affect archive searching.
5915
5916 @ifset GENERIC
5917 @node Machine Dependent
5918 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5919
5920 @cindex machine dependencies
5921 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5922 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5923 functionality are not listed.
5924
5925 @menu
5926 @ifset H8300
5927 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5928 @end ifset
5929 @ifset I960
5930 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5931 @end ifset
5932 @ifset ARM
5933 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5934 @end ifset
5935 @ifset HPPA
5936 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5937 @end ifset
5938 @ifset M68K
5939 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5940 @end ifset
5941 @ifset MMIX
5942 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5943 @end ifset
5944 @ifset MSP430
5945 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5946 @end ifset
5947 @ifset M68HC11
5948 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5949 @end ifset
5950 @ifset POWERPC
5951 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5952 @end ifset
5953 @ifset POWERPC64
5954 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5955 @end ifset
5956 @ifset SPU
5957 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5958 @end ifset
5959 @ifset TICOFF
5960 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5961 @end ifset
5962 @ifset WIN32
5963 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5964 @end ifset
5965 @ifset XTENSA
5966 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5967 @end ifset
5968 @end menu
5969 @end ifset
5970
5971 @ifset H8300
5972 @ifclear GENERIC
5973 @raisesections
5974 @end ifclear
5975
5976 @node H8/300
5977 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5978
5979 @cindex H8/300 support
5980 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5981 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5982
5983 @table @emph
5984 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
5985 @item relaxing address modes
5986 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5987 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5988 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5989 respectively.
5990
5991 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5992 @item synthesizing instructions
5993 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5994 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5995 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5996 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5997 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5998 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5999 top page of memory).
6000
6001 @item bit manipulation instructions
6002 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6003 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6004 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6005 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6006 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6007 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6008 the top page of memory).
6009
6010 @item system control instructions
6011 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6012 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6013 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6014 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6015 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6016 the top page of memory).
6017 @end table
6018
6019 @ifclear GENERIC
6020 @lowersections
6021 @end ifclear
6022 @end ifset
6023
6024 @ifclear GENERIC
6025 @ifset Renesas
6026 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6027 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6028 @node Renesas
6029 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6030
6031 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6032 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6033 options are required for these chips.
6034 @end ifset
6035 @end ifclear
6036
6037 @ifset I960
6038 @ifclear GENERIC
6039 @raisesections
6040 @end ifclear
6041
6042 @node i960
6043 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6044
6045 @cindex i960 support
6046
6047 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6048 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6049 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6050 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6051 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6052 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6053 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6054
6055 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6056 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6057 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6058 the names
6059
6060 @smallexample
6061 @group
6062 try
6063 libtry.a
6064 tryca
6065 libtryca.a
6066 @end group
6067 @end smallexample
6068
6069 @noindent
6070 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6071 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6072
6073 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6074 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6075 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6076 specifies a library.
6077
6078 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6079 @cindex relaxing on i960
6080 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6081 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6082 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6083 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6084 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6085 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6086 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6087 not itself call any subroutines).
6088
6089 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6090 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6091 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6092 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6093
6094 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6095
6096 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6097 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6098 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6099
6100 @ifclear GENERIC
6101 @lowersections
6102 @end ifclear
6103 @end ifset
6104
6105 @ifset ARM
6106 @ifclear GENERIC
6107 @raisesections
6108 @end ifclear
6109
6110 @ifset M68HC11
6111 @ifclear GENERIC
6112 @raisesections
6113 @end ifclear
6114
6115 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6116 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6117
6118 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6119
6120 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6121
6122 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6123 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6124
6125 @table @emph
6126 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6127 @item relaxing address modes
6128 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6129 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6130 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6131 respectively.
6132
6133 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6134 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6135 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6136
6137 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6138 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6139 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6140 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6141 @code{bset} instructions.
6142
6143 @end table
6144
6145 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6146
6147 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6148 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6149 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6150 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6151 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6152 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6153 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6154 point to the function trampoline.
6155
6156 @ifclear GENERIC
6157 @lowersections
6158 @end ifclear
6159 @end ifset
6160
6161 @node ARM
6162 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6163
6164 @cindex ARM interworking support
6165 @kindex --support-old-code
6166 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6167 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6168 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6169 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6170 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6171 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6172 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6173 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6174 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6175 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6176
6177 @cindex thumb entry point
6178 @cindex entry point, thumb
6179 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6180 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6181 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6182 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6183 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6184 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6185
6186 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6187 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6188 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6189 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6190 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6191 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6192
6193 @cindex BE8
6194 @kindex --be8
6195 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6196 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6197 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6198
6199 @cindex TARGET1
6200 @kindex --target1-rel
6201 @kindex --target1-abs
6202 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6203 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6204 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6205 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6206
6207 @cindex TARGET2
6208 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6209 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6210 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6211 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6212 @table @samp
6213 @item rel
6214 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6215 @item abs
6216 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6217 @item got-rel
6218 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6219 @end table
6220
6221 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6222 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6223 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6224 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6225 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6226 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6227
6228 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6229 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6230 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6231
6232 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6233 relocations are ignored.
6234
6235 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6236 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6237 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6238 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6239
6240 @smallexample
6241 TST rM, #1
6242 MOVEQ PC, rM
6243 BX Rn
6244 @end smallexample
6245
6246 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6247 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6248 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6249
6250 @cindex USE_BLX
6251 @kindex --use-blx
6252 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6253 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6254 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6255 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6256 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6257
6258 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6259 specify it if you are using that target.
6260
6261 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6262 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6263 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6264 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6265 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6266 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6267 the support code can read the intended values.
6268
6269 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6270 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6271 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6272 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6273 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6274 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6275
6276 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6277 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6278 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6279 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6280 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6281 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6282
6283 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6284 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6285 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6286 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6287 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6288 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6289 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6290
6291 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6292 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6293 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6294 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6295 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6296 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6297 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6298 not be diagnosed.
6299
6300 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6301 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6302 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6303 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6304 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6305 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6306 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6307
6308 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6309 @kindex --pic-veneer
6310 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6311 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6312 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6313 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6314
6315 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6316 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6317 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6318 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6319 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6320 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6321 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6322 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6323 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6324 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6325 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6326 where they should be placed.
6327
6328 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6329 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6330 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6331 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6332 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6333 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6334 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6335 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6336 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6337 from the input sections.
6338
6339 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6340 @samp{N = +1}.
6341
6342 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6343 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6344 otherwise.
6345
6346 @ifclear GENERIC
6347 @lowersections
6348 @end ifclear
6349 @end ifset
6350
6351 @ifset HPPA
6352 @ifclear GENERIC
6353 @raisesections
6354 @end ifclear
6355
6356 @node HPPA ELF32
6357 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6358 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6359 @kindex --multi-subspace
6360 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6361 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6362 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6363 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6364 multiple sub-spaces.
6365
6366 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6367 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6368 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6369 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6370 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6371 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6372 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6373 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6374 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6375 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6376 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6377 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6378 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6379 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6380 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6381 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6382
6383 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6384 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6385 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6386 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6387
6388 @ifclear GENERIC
6389 @lowersections
6390 @end ifclear
6391 @end ifset
6392
6393 @ifset M68K
6394 @ifclear GENERIC
6395 @raisesections
6396 @end ifclear
6397
6398 @node M68K
6399 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6400
6401 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6402 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6403 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6404 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6405 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6406 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6407 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6408 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6409 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6410 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6411 support such GOTs.
6412 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6413 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6414 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6415 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6416
6417 @ifclear GENERIC
6418 @lowersections
6419 @end ifclear
6420 @end ifset
6421
6422 @ifset MMIX
6423 @ifclear GENERIC
6424 @raisesections
6425 @end ifclear
6426
6427 @node MMIX
6428 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6429 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6430 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6431 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6432 can translate between the two formats.
6433
6434 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6435 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6436 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6437 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6438 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6439 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6440 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6441 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6442
6443 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6444 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6445 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6446 of a section.
6447
6448 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6449 are left out from an mmo file.
6450
6451 @ifclear GENERIC
6452 @lowersections
6453 @end ifclear
6454 @end ifset
6455
6456 @ifset MSP430
6457 @ifclear GENERIC
6458 @raisesections
6459 @end ifclear
6460
6461 @node MSP430
6462 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6463 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6464 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6465 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6466
6467 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6468 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6469
6470 @table @code
6471 @item @samp{.vectors}
6472 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6473
6474 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6475 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6476 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6477
6478 @item @samp{.infomem}
6479 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6480 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6481
6482 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6483 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6484 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6485
6486 @item @samp{.noinit}
6487 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6488
6489 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6490 @end table
6491
6492 @ifclear GENERIC
6493 @lowersections
6494 @end ifclear
6495 @end ifset
6496
6497 @ifset POWERPC
6498 @ifclear GENERIC
6499 @raisesections
6500 @end ifclear
6501
6502 @node PowerPC ELF32
6503 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6504 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6505 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6506 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6507 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6508 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6509 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6510 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6511 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6512 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6513 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6514 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6515 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6516
6517 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6518 @table @option
6519 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6520 @kindex --bss-plt
6521 @item --bss-plt
6522 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6523 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6524 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6525 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6526 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6527 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6528 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6529 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6530
6531 @kindex --secure-plt
6532 @item --secure-plt
6533 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6534 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6535 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6536 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6537 style BSS PLT.
6538
6539 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6540 @kindex --sdata-got
6541 @item --sdata-got
6542 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6543 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6544 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6545 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6546 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6547 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6548 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6549 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6550 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6551 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6552 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6553 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6554
6555 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6556 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6557 @item --emit-stub-syms
6558 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6559 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6560
6561 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6562 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6563 @item --no-tls-optimize
6564 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6565 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6566 disable the optimization.
6567 @end table
6568
6569 @ifclear GENERIC
6570 @lowersections
6571 @end ifclear
6572 @end ifset
6573
6574 @ifset POWERPC64
6575 @ifclear GENERIC
6576 @raisesections
6577 @end ifclear
6578
6579 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6580 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6581
6582 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6583 @table @option
6584 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6585 @kindex --stub-group-size
6586 @item --stub-group-size
6587 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6588 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6589 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6590 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6591 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6592 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6593 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6594 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6595 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6596 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6597 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6598 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6599 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6600 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6601
6602 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6603 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6604 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6605 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6606
6607 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6608 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6609 @item --emit-stub-syms
6610 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6611 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6612
6613 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6614 @kindex --dotsyms
6615 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6616 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6617 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6618 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6619 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6620 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6621 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6622 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6623 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6624 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6625 feature.
6626
6627 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6628 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6629 @item --no-tls-optimize
6630 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6631 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6632 disable the optimization.
6633
6634 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6635 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6636 @item --no-opd-optimize
6637 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6638 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6639 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6640 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6641
6642 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6643 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6644 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6645 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6646 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6647 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6648 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6649
6650 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6651 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6652 @item --no-toc-optimize
6653 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6654 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6655 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6656 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6657 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6658 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6659 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6660 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6661 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6662 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6663 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6664 optimization.
6665
6666 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6667 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6668 @item --no-multi-toc
6669 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6670 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6671 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6672 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6673 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6674 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6675 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6676 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6677 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6678 @end table
6679
6680 @ifclear GENERIC
6681 @lowersections
6682 @end ifclear
6683 @end ifset
6684
6685 @ifset SPU
6686 @ifclear GENERIC
6687 @raisesections
6688 @end ifclear
6689
6690 @node SPU ELF
6691 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6692
6693 @cindex SPU ELF options
6694 @table @option
6695
6696 @cindex SPU plugins
6697 @kindex --plugin
6698 @item --plugin
6699 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6700
6701 @cindex SPU overlays
6702 @kindex --no-overlays
6703 @item --no-overlays
6704 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6705 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6706 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6707 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6708
6709 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6710 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6711 @item --emit-stub-syms
6712 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6713 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6714
6715 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6716 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6717 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6718 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6719 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6720 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6721
6722 @cindex SPU local store size
6723 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6724 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6725 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6726 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6727 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6728
6729 @cindex SPU
6730 @kindex --stack-analysis
6731 @item --stack-analysis
6732 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6733 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6734 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6735 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6736 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6737 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6738 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6739 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6740 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6741 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6742 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6743 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6744 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6745 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6746 and calls will be given.
6747
6748 @cindex SPU
6749 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6750 @item --emit-stack-syms
6751 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6752 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6753 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6754 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6755 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6756 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6757 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6758 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6759 @end table
6760
6761 @ifclear GENERIC
6762 @lowersections
6763 @end ifclear
6764 @end ifset
6765
6766 @ifset TICOFF
6767 @ifclear GENERIC
6768 @raisesections
6769 @end ifclear
6770
6771 @node TI COFF
6772 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6773 @cindex TI COFF versions
6774 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6775 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6776 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6777 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6778 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6779 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6780
6781 @ifclear GENERIC
6782 @lowersections
6783 @end ifclear
6784 @end ifset
6785
6786 @ifset WIN32
6787 @ifclear GENERIC
6788 @raisesections
6789 @end ifclear
6790
6791 @node WIN32
6792 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6793
6794 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6795 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6796 command line options mentioned here.
6797
6798 @table @emph
6799 @cindex import libraries
6800 @item import libraries
6801 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6802 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6803 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6804 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6805 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6806 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6807
6808 @item exporting DLL symbols
6809 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6810 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6811
6812 @table @emph
6813 @item using auto-export functionality
6814 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6815 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6816 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6817
6818 @itemize
6819 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6820 @item --exclude-symbols
6821 @item --exclude-libs
6822 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6823 @item --version-script
6824 @end itemize
6825
6826 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6827 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6828 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6829 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6830 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6831 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6832 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6833 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6834
6835 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6836 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6837 if either of the following are true:
6838
6839 @itemize
6840 @item A DEF file is used.
6841 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6842 @end itemize
6843
6844 @item using a DEF file
6845 @cindex using a DEF file
6846 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6847 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6848 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6849 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6850 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6851
6852 @example
6853 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6854 @end example
6855
6856 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6857 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6858
6859 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6860
6861 @example
6862 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6863
6864 EXPORTS
6865 foo
6866 bar
6867 _bar = bar
6868 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6869 var1 DATA
6870 doo = foo == foo2
6871 eoo DATA == var1
6872 @end example
6873
6874 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
6875 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6876 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6877 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6878 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6879 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6880 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6881 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6882 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
6883
6884 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6885 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6886 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6887
6888 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6889 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6890 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6891 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6892
6893 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6894 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6895 non-default base address for the image.
6896
6897 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6898 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6899 filename specified on the command line.
6900
6901 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6902
6903 @example
6904 EXPORTS
6905 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6906 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6907 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
6908 @end example
6909
6910 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6911 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6912 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6913 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6914 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6915 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6916 string in import/export table for the symbol.
6917
6918 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6919
6920 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6921 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6922 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6923 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6924 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6925
6926 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6927 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6928 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6929 @code{*_imp__foo}).
6930
6931 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6932 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6933 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6934 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6935 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6936 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6937 application will behave unexpectedly.
6938
6939 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6940 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6941 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6942 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6943 the DLL without an import library.
6944
6945 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6946 other DEF file statements
6947
6948 @cindex creating a DEF file
6949 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6950 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6951
6952 @item Using decorations
6953 @cindex Using decorations
6954 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6955 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6956 declared as:
6957
6958 @example
6959 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6960 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6961 @end example
6962
6963 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6964 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6965 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6966 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6967
6968 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6969 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
6970 instead:
6971
6972 @example
6973 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6974 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6975 @end example
6976
6977 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6978 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6979 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6980 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
6981 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6982 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6983 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6984 information.
6985 @end table
6986
6987 @cindex automatic data imports
6988 @item automatic data imports
6989 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6990 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6991 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6992 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6993 code to these platforms, especially for large
6994 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
6995 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6996 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6997 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6998 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6999 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7000 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7001 trigger the feature's use.
7002
7003 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7004 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7005
7006 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7007 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7008
7009 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7010 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7011 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7012 below.
7013
7014 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7015 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7016 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7017 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7018 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7019 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7020 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7021 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7022 references.
7023
7024 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7025 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7026 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7027 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7028 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7029 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7030 run without error on an older system.
7031
7032 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7033 enabled as needed.
7034
7035 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7036 @item direct linking to a dll
7037 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7038 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7039 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7040 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7041 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7042 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7043 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7044 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7045 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7046 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7047
7048 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7049 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7050 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7051 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7052 select the dll instead of an import library.
7053
7054
7055 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7056 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7057
7058 @example
7059 libxxx.dll.a
7060 xxx.dll.a
7061 libxxx.a
7062 xxx.lib
7063 cygxxx.dll (*)
7064 libxxx.dll
7065 xxx.dll
7066 @end example
7067
7068 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7069
7070 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7071 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7072 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7073 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7074 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7075
7076 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7077 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7078 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7079 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7080 could coexist on the same machine.
7081
7082 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7083 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7084 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7085
7086 @example
7087 bin/
7088 cygxxx.dll
7089 lib/
7090 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7091 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7092 @end example
7093
7094 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7095 done two ways:
7096
7097 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7098 @example
7099 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7100 @end example
7101
7102 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7103 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7104 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7105 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7106
7107 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7108 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7109 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7110 making the app/dll.
7111
7112 @example
7113 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7114 @end example
7115
7116 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7117
7118 @example
7119 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7120 @end example
7121
7122 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7123 perfectly legal
7124
7125 @example
7126 bin/
7127 cygxxx-5.dll
7128 lib/
7129 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7130 @end example
7131
7132 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7133 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7134 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7135
7136 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7137 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7138
7139 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7140 work with auto-imported data.
7141
7142 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7143 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7144 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7145 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7146 possible to do this without an import lib.
7147
7148 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7149 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7150 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7151 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7152
7153 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7154 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7155 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7156 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7157 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7158 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7159 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7160
7161 @item symbol aliasing
7162 @table @emph
7163 @item adding additional names
7164 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7165 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7166 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7167 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7168 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7169
7170 @example
7171 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7172
7173 EXPORTS
7174 foo
7175 _foo = foo
7176 @end example
7177
7178 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7179
7180 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7181 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7182
7183 @example
7184 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7185 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7186 @end example
7187
7188 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7189 symbols.
7190
7191 @item renaming symbols
7192 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7193 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7194 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7195 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7196 created). In the following example:
7197
7198 @example
7199 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7200
7201 EXPORTS
7202 _foo = foo
7203 @end example
7204
7205 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7206 @samp{_foo}.
7207 @end table
7208
7209 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7210 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7211 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7212 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7213 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7214 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7215 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7216 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7217 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7218 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7219 which is probably not what you wanted.
7220
7221 @cindex weak externals
7222 @item weak externals
7223 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7224 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7225 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7226 are three variants of weak externals:
7227 @itemize
7228 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7229 called lazy externals.
7230 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7231 This form is not presently implemented.
7232 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7233 implemented.
7234 @end itemize
7235 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7236 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7237 uses a default value.
7238
7239 @cindex aligned common symbols
7240 @item aligned common symbols
7241 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7242 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7243 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7244 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7245 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7246 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7247 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7248 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7249 @end table
7250
7251 @ifclear GENERIC
7252 @lowersections
7253 @end ifclear
7254 @end ifset
7255
7256 @ifset XTENSA
7257 @ifclear GENERIC
7258 @raisesections
7259 @end ifclear
7260
7261 @node Xtensa
7262 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7263
7264 @cindex Xtensa processors
7265 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7266 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7267 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7268 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7269 example, with the command:
7270
7271 @smallexample
7272 SECTIONS
7273 @{
7274 .text : @{
7275 *(.literal .text)
7276 @}
7277 @}
7278 @end smallexample
7279
7280 @noindent
7281 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7282 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7283 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7284 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7285 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7286 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7287 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7288
7289 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7290 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7291 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7292 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7293 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7294 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7295 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7296 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7297 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7298 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7299 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7300 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7301
7302 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7303 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7304 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7305 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7306 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7307 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7308 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7309 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7310 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7311 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7312 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7313 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7314 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7315 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7316
7317 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7318 control the linker:
7319
7320 @cindex Xtensa options
7321 @table @option
7322 @item --size-opt
7323 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7324 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7325 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7326 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7327 preserve the correctness of the code.
7328 @end table
7329
7330 @ifclear GENERIC
7331 @lowersections
7332 @end ifclear
7333 @end ifset
7334
7335 @ifclear SingleFormat
7336 @node BFD
7337 @chapter BFD
7338
7339 @cindex back end
7340 @cindex object file management
7341 @cindex object formats available
7342 @kindex objdump -i
7343 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7344 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7345 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7346 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7347 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7348 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7349 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7350 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7351 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7352
7353 @cindex BFD requirements
7354 @cindex requirements for BFD
7355 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7356 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7357 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7358 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7359 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7360 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7361 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7362
7363 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7364 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7365 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7366 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7367
7368 @menu
7369 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7370 @end menu
7371
7372 @node BFD outline
7373 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7374 @cindex opening object files
7375 @include bfdsumm.texi
7376 @end ifclear
7377
7378 @node Reporting Bugs
7379 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7380 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7381 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7382
7383 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7384
7385 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7386 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7387 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7388 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7389 @command{ld}.
7390
7391 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7392 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7393
7394 @menu
7395 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7396 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7397 @end menu
7398
7399 @node Bug Criteria
7400 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7401 @cindex bug criteria
7402
7403 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7404
7405 @itemize @bullet
7406 @cindex fatal signal
7407 @cindex linker crash
7408 @cindex crash of linker
7409 @item
7410 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7411 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7412
7413 @cindex error on valid input
7414 @item
7415 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7416
7417 @cindex invalid input
7418 @item
7419 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7420 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7421 object files are correct.
7422
7423 @item
7424 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7425 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7426 @end itemize
7427
7428 @node Bug Reporting
7429 @section How to Report Bugs
7430 @cindex bug reports
7431 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7432
7433 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7434 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7435 recommend you contact that organization first.
7436
7437 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7438 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7439 distribution.
7440
7441 @ifset BUGURL
7442 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7443 @value{BUGURL}.
7444 @end ifset
7445
7446 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7447 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7448 fact or leave it out, state it!
7449
7450 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7451 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7452 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7453 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7454 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7455 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7456 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7457 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7458 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7459 and the most helpful.
7460
7461 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7462 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7463 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7464
7465 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7466 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7467 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7468 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7469
7470 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7471
7472 @itemize @bullet
7473 @item
7474 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7475 the @samp{--version} argument.
7476
7477 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7478 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7479
7480 @item
7481 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7482 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7483
7484 @item
7485 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7486 version number.
7487
7488 @item
7489 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7490 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7491
7492 @item
7493 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7494 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7495 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7496 sufficient.
7497
7498 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7499 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7500
7501 @item
7502 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7503 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7504 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7505 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7506 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7507 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7508 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7509 attachments are best.
7510
7511 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7512 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7513 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7514 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7515 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7516
7517 @item
7518 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7519 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7520
7521 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7522 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7523 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7524 a chance to make a mistake.
7525
7526 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7527 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7528 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7529 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7530 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7531 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7532 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7533 any conclusion from our observations.
7534
7535 @item
7536 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7537 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7538 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7539 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7540 context, not by line number.
7541
7542 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7543 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7544 @end itemize
7545
7546 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7547
7548 @itemize @bullet
7549 @item
7550 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7551
7552 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7553 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7554 changes will not affect it.
7555
7556 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7557 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7558 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7559 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7560
7561 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7562 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7563 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7564 less time, and so on.
7565
7566 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7567 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7568
7569 @item
7570 A patch for the bug.
7571
7572 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7573 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7574 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7575 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7576
7577 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7578 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7579 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7580 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7581 fixed.
7582
7583 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7584 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7585 help us to understand.
7586
7587 @item
7588 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7589
7590 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7591 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7592 @end itemize
7593
7594 @node MRI
7595 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7596 @cindex MRI compatibility
7597 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7598 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7599 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7600 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7601 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7602 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7603 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7604
7605 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7606 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7607 features to make use of them.
7608
7609 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7610 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7611
7612 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7613 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7614 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7615 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7616 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7617
7618 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7619
7620 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7621 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7622 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7623
7624 @table @code
7625 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7626 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7627 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7628 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7629 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7630 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7631 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7632 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7633 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7634 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7635 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7636
7637 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7638 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7639 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7640 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7641
7642 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7643
7644 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7645 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7646 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7647 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7648
7649 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7650 @item BASE @var{expression}
7651 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7652 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7653
7654 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7655 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7656 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7657 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7658
7659 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7660 @item END
7661 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7662
7663 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7664 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7665 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7666 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7667
7668 @enumerate
7669 @item
7670 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7671
7672 @item
7673 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7674
7675 @item
7676 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7677 @samp{COFF}
7678 @end enumerate
7679
7680 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7681 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7682 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7683 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7684
7685 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7686 same line, with no change in its effect.
7687
7688 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7689 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7690 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7691 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7692 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7693 command line.
7694
7695 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7696 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7697 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7698 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7699 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7700
7701 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7702 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7703 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7704 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7705 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7706 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7707 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7708 file, in the order specified.
7709
7710 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7711 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7712 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7713 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7714 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7715 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7716
7717 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7718 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7719 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7720 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7721 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7722 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7723 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7724 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7725 @end table
7726
7727 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7728 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7729 @include fdl.texi
7730
7731 @node LD Index
7732 @unnumbered LD Index
7733
7734 @printindex cp
7735
7736 @tex
7737 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7738 % meantime:
7739 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7740 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7741 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7742 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7743 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7744 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7745 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7746 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7747 \page\colophon
7748 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7749 @end tex
7750
7751 @bye
This page took 0.21279 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.